JP7469067B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

One example of a gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, which is equipped with a storage section capable of storing gaming media supplied from a gaming island installed in an amusement parlor, a payout device (payout section) capable of paying out gaming media, and a guide path forming section that forms a guide path that guides the gaming media supplied to the storage section to the payout section, and the storage section and the guide path forming section are attached to the gaming frame by screw members (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-96050 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, if the screw members for attaching the storage section or the guide passage forming section to the gaming frame or the screw members attached inside the gaming island come loose and fall into the storage section or the guide passage forming section, the screw members may get mixed into the payout device along with the gaming media, causing the gaming media to be unable to be paid out properly, causing the payout device to break down, or the screw members may be paid out to the player along with the gaming media.

The present invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A storage section capable of storing game media;
A payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the gaming media from the storage section to the payout section;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover a portion of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
A blocking means for blocking the flow of the game media down the guide passage forming portion;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
a non-covered area that is not covered by the fall limiting portion on an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions capable of limiting movement of the screw member that has dropped into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion,
At least a portion of the plurality of specific restriction portions are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered regions in the guide passage formation portion,
The screw drop limiting portion is configured so that the game medium that has fallen onto the screw drop limiting portion does not remain there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw drop limiting portion does not fall into the guide passage forming portion and can remain on the screw drop limiting portion,
Among a plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion, a predetermined screw member is also used as a screw member for attaching an earth member,
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing a game medium (e.g., a game ball P);
A payout unit (e.g., a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section (e.g., a first guide passage forming section 202 or a second guide passage forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (e.g., a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section;
A cover portion (e.g., a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for limiting the fall of the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover portion into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 22 and 24 ),
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the discharge portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27),
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion from falling into the guide path forming portion. It is also possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide path forming portion from entering the payout portion. It is also possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation are being executed.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only move the pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and do not enhance the interest of the effects. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine with a gaming board attached thereto. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine as seen diagonally from behind. 2 is a perspective view showing the state in which the game board has been removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of a passage forming body to a frame for an amusement machine. FIG. An enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the rear of the gaming machine frame. 4A is a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. 1A is a plan view showing a first induction passage forming portion, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D of FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F of FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ of (A), (D) is an oblique view showing the third cover body, and (E) is an oblique view showing the ball stopping member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopping member is in a first state, and (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopping member is in a second state. 1A is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K--K of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L--L of FIG. This is an oblique view showing the area around the ball tank section on the back of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the area around the ball tank section on the back of the game frame, and (B) is an M-M cross-sectional view of (A). This is an oblique view showing the area around the first guide passage forming portion on the back of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. A plan view showing the area around the first guide passage forming portion on the back of the game frame. 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along line N--N in FIG. 21, FIG. 21B is a diagram showing the rotating state of the screw member, and FIG. 21C is a cross-sectional view taken along line O--O in FIG. 21A is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line R-R in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S of Figure 21. (A) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopping member is in a first state, (B) is a T-T cross-sectional view of (A), (C) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopping member is in a second state, and (D) is a U-U cross-sectional view of (C). 6 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a first guide passage forming portion showing a moving state of a screw member. FIG. A vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion. 13A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine in the characteristic section 053SG. A diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. 1 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1 on which an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing a wiring pattern branching off from a data bus on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the connection state of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. A figure showing the game control board in Example 1 stored in the board case. 4 is a circuit diagram for supplying backup power to a game control microcomputer mounted on a game control board in the first embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. A diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. A figure showing an example of a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is installed in a game machine. A figure showing an example of a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is installed in a game machine. A diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. A diagram showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. A diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the solder side of a game control board in Example 2 in relation to the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit. A diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of a game control board in Example 2 in relation to the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit. A circuit diagram showing the connection between a game control microcomputer and an input circuit and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. 11A and 11B are oblique views showing the structure of a specific electronic component mounted on a game control board in Example 3, where (A) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from above, and (B) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from below. A cross-sectional view showing the state in which specific electronic components are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of final effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of final effect. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing a game medium (e.g., a game ball P);
A payout unit (e.g., a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section (e.g., a first guide passage forming section 202 or a second guide passage forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (e.g., a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section;
The present invention is characterized by the following:

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
a cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 314 of a first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of a second cover body 320, and a cover portion 334 of a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion,
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined restriction portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover portion from falling into the induction passage forming portion (e.g., first induction passage forming portion 202) (see Figures 22 and 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
The specified restriction portions (e.g., long holes 316A-316C, grooves 326A-326C, recess 336) are characterized in that they are arranged to allow game media that have fallen onto the cover portion to fall from the cover portion without being retained therein.
According to this feature, the game medium does not get stuck in the designated restriction portion, and a state in which the screw member can always be kept stuck there is maintained, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect,
The predetermined restriction portion includes a first retention portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retention portion (e.g., grooves 326A to 326C) that can retain a screw member (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion,
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (e.g., the dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention section as it approaches the dispensing section, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from moving and falling into the guide passage forming section.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The induction path forming portion (e.g., the first induction path forming portion 202) is provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the induction path forming portion to the dispensing portion (e.g., the dispensing device 200) (see Figures 12 and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to fall out of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the discharge portion (L11>L2, see FIG. 11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from getting mixed in the payout portion. Also, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow down of the game media.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The plurality of holes each have a different size,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G. See FIG. 12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member can be preferably dropped outside the guide passage forming portion through the specified hole portion, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine of aspect 6 or 7,
a non-covered region (e.g., non-covered region 350) that is not covered by the cover portion (e.g., cover portion 314 of first cover body 310, cover portion 324 of second cover body 320, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) on the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
At least some of the specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered regions in the induction passage formation portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming portion from the uncoated region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion through the hole.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
The storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) is provided in a game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
The storage section includes:
The play frame is disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (e.g., the first protrusion 224) of the play frame,
The upper surface of the predetermined portion is in close proximity to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that a screw member does not enter between the upper surface of the predetermined portion and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from getting caught between the designated portion of the game frame and the storage portion and causing damage to the member.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A first board (e.g., a main board 11, a performance control board 12, etc.) attached to a position lower than the guide path forming part (e.g., a first guide path forming part 202);
A second board (e.g., a terminal board 210) that is attached to a position above the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The first board is attached by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is attached by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are attached to the game board 2 by a screw member, while the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and locking parts 236 as a mounting means different from the screw members. See FIG. 17).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., a terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., a cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first board has a smaller number of wires connected thereto than the external output board (for example, the number of connections of the cable C that can be connected to the multiple connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming section 202 is a first number (for example, 20), while the respective signal lines are also connected to the second boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming section 202, but the number of the signal lines is a second number (for example, 10) that is less than the first number).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to external forces during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, thereby preventing the screw members from coming loose and falling into the guide passage forming section due to external force being applied to the external output board.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
A game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage section (e.g., a ball tank forming section 201);
A mounting frame (e.g., a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for limiting the movement of the screw member that has dropped into the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from becoming mixed into the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
A special restriction portion (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) is provided around the induction passage forming portion (e.g., the first induction passage forming portion 202) to restrict the screw members (e.g., the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moving toward the induction passage forming portion from falling into the induction passage forming portion (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from dropping into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The special restriction portion is a special retention portion (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can retain a screw member (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moving toward the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202) before the screw member reaches the guide passage forming portion, and is provided below the screw member attached to the mounting portion,
The screw member that has come off the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A) and FIG. 23(B) and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member that has come off the mounted portion can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 15 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (e.g., recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is a depth from which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A) and FIG. 23(B) and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily removed.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifteenth aspects,
a cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202);
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion,
A specific portion (e.g., a ball stopper member 340) capable of retaining the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion is provided on the side of the dispensing portion in the inclined direction of the cover portion (see FIGS. 15, 26, and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) can be changed between a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down, and a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult or impossible to flow down (for example, the first state in which the rotating portion 341 is in an upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the second state in which the rotating portion 341 is in a tilted position and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 to be able to contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204).
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to remain there than when the specific portion is in the first state (see FIG. 26 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to an eighteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth or seventeenth aspect,
The cover portion is
a first cover portion (e.g., cover portion 324 of first cover body 310, cover portion 324 of second cover body 320) provided with a retaining portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion on the cover portion;
a second cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 334 of a third cover body 330) that is different from the first cover portion and that has the specific portion;
The present invention is characterized in that it includes:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eighteenth aspect,
The second cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (e.g., the screw member N16) having a loosening prevention portion (e.g., a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th aspects,
The storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) is provided in a game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
The storage section is attached to the game frame at a plurality of points by screw members (e.g., screw members N11 to N14) having anti-loosening portions,
The screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section (for example, the first guide passage forming section 202) to the game frame are attached so that they fall outside the guide passage forming section even if they come off the game frame (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member attaching the storage section is less likely to come off the game frame, while even if the screw member attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section does come off, it will fall outside the guide passage forming section, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the payout section.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
Among a plurality of screw members for attaching the storage section (e.g., the ball tank forming section 201) and the guide passage forming section (e.g., the first guide passage forming section 202) to the game frame (e.g., the game machine frame 3), a predetermined screw member (e.g., the screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (e.g., the ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the number of screw members can be reduced, so that the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine of aspect 20 or 21,
The screw members (e.g., screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) are attached to a metal member (e.g., metal plate 222) for reinforcing the game frame (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be attached firmly.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 20 to 22,
The screw members (e.g., screw members N3 to N6) attached to an upper position of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) in the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3) are characterized in that they are different screw members from the screw member having the anti-loosening portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 20 to 23,
The game machine includes a game board (e.g., a game board 2) that is detachable from the game frame (e.g., a game machine frame 3),
In the area below the guide path forming portion (e.g., the first guide path forming portion 202) in the game board, an inclined surface (e.g., the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) capable of causing the fallen screw member to flow down is provided (see Figures 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing back into the guide passage forming portion again.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 1 to 24,
A cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 360 of the first modified example) is provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (e.g., the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The induction passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (e.g., a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (e.g., the left side);
a second passage forming portion (e.g., a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from a lower end portion of the first passage forming portion;
having
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 29(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the discharge portion.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 2 to 25,
A wiring (e.g., a cable CH) is provided in a position near the predetermined limiting portion (e.g., the recess 361) of the cover portion (e.g., the cover portion 360 of the first modified example) so as to cross the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 29B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the screw member becomes easily caught in the wiring and becomes lodged in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned will be referred to as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be referred to as the rear. The following description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions as seen by the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 2b are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a spacer member attached integrally to the rear side of the board plate. The game board 2 may also be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 2b are provided on the front surface of the game board.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the bottom left of the game area Y), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided, which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c on the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

When a game ball enters each winning port, including the general winning port, it is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball entering a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (bottom left of the game area Y in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is an outlet (not shown) that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area Y. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area Y using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a payout outlet is provided from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full. A ball supply tray (lower tray) may also be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (for example, "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (a jackpot type for a jackpot game state in the same manner as a small jackpot game state, for example, a jackpot type for which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot tell whether he is currently in a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of a small jackpot game state and after the end of a jackpot game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Fig. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board 91 (see Fig. 3), etc.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and various tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The CPU 103 also determines whether a first start winning or a second start winning has occurred, and if a winning has occurred, executes a start winning process in which random numbers are extracted for determining the special chart display result, the type of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern, etc., and stored (recorded) at the top of the free entries in the first special chart reserved memory section or the second special chart reserved memory section.

The CPU 103 also executes a normal special pattern process to determine whether or not to start a special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in the first special pattern reserved memory unit and the second special pattern reserved memory unit, and to determine (predetermine) whether or not to set the variable display result of the special pattern or performance pattern as a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the special pattern display result, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special pattern game, the CPU 103 executes a process to determine (by lottery) whether or not to derive and display a jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number value stored when the start winning occurs.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 3 to 7. Figure 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. Figure 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. Figure 5 is a plan view showing the gaming machine frame with the gaming board attached. Figure 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine as seen diagonally from behind. Figure 7 is a perspective view showing the gaming board removed from the gaming machine frame. Note that the glass door frame 50 is omitted from Figures 5 to 7.

As shown in Figures 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably attached, a glass door frame 50 that is provided so that the front of the game machine frame 3 can be opened and closed around the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a square-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed around the left side, and can be installed on a game island (not shown) installed in an amusement park by fixing the outer frame 60 to the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a first passage forming body 203 is provided extending in the left-right direction along the upper edge 3A of the game machine frame 3. The first passage forming body 203 is made up of a ball tank forming section 201 that forms a storage section capable of storing game balls supplied from a circulation path for game balls (hereinafter sometimes referred to as game balls P) provided inside the game island (not shown) via a supply device 150 (see Figures 3 and 4), and a first guide passage forming section 202 that forms a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 toward the left side. In addition, a terminal board 210 (described later) is provided above the first guide passage forming section 202.

The supply device 150 has a guide member 150A consisting of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding game balls in the circulation path of the game island, a sprocket (not shown) capable of sending out a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) of game balls guided by the guide member 150A, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and a lever switch (not shown) that is pressed against the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in a closed state in which it is closed by the game machine frame 3; in the closed state, when the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3, the game balls sent out by the sprocket can fall into the ball tank forming section 201, and in the open state, when the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3, the game balls sent out by the sprocket are held so that they cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket rotates with the drive source, and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out and supplied to the ball tank forming section 201. In addition, the supply device 150 is configured by assembling multiple members with multiple screw members (not shown) to form a case body 150B, which is fixed to a predetermined location on the game island using multiple screw members (not shown).

The second passage forming body 207 is made up of a second guide passage forming section 204 that forms a second guide passage that guides downward the game balls guided to the left by the first guide passage forming section 202, a payout device 200 that constitutes a payout section capable of paying out the game balls guided by the second guide passage forming section 204, a payout passage forming section 205 that guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player, and a ball removal passage forming section 206 that forms a ball removal passage that guides the game balls guided by the second guide passage forming section 204 to a discharge section (not shown) provided at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to discharge them outside the pachinko game machine 1 without paying them out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming section 205. The second passage forming body 207 is made up of a second guide passage forming section 204 that forms a second guide passage that guides the game balls guided to the left by the first guide passage forming section 202 to the upper tray, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player, and a ball removal passage forming section 206 that forms a ball removal passage that guides the game balls guided by the second guide passage forming section 204 to a discharge section (not shown) provided at the bottom of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to discharge them outside the pachinko game machine 1 without paying them out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming section 205.

The payout device 200 is made up of a case body formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is provided inside with a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one ball at a time), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, a switching valve that can switch the flow path of the game balls between a payout passage and a ball removal passage, and an operating lever for operating the switching valve. In addition, the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a board case 91A that houses a power supply board 91, a board case 37A that houses a payout control board 37, and the like.

In this embodiment, a ball failure switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 constantly monitors whether there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage upstream of the payout device 200 based on the input state of the detection signal from the ball failure switch (not shown). If the ball failure switch (not shown) remains off for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason, such as ball clogging, that is, a supply error has occurred, and the payout operation by the payout device 200 is stopped. In addition, a supply error is displayed on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11, and a supply error command is output to the performance control board 12, so that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a notification process that a supply error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front of the glass door frame 50 to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably placed in the opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-shaped body 2a consisting of the board panel and spacer member described above, various game parts (e.g., obstacle nails and winning devices) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, an image display device 5 provided on the rear side of the plate-shaped body 2a, a performance device having a movable body 32, electronic parts such as a board case 12A in which the performance control board 12 is stored and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a cover body 220 that protects the plate-shaped part, the performance device, the electronic parts, etc.

The circuit board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed so that each circuit board can be stored inside using a base member and a cover member made of transparent synthetic resin material, and among these, the circuit board cases 11A and 12A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20 and N21 (see Figure 3), respectively, and the circuit board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by a locking means (not shown). The cover body 220 is formed into a box shape made of transparent synthetic resin material with an open front, and part of the back surface is an opening/closing part 220A that can rotate around the right side, making it possible to open and close part of the back surface of the game board 2.

As shown in Figures 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back of the gaming board 2, protrude rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the top opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3, so that when the outer frame 60 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), gaming balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming part 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the supply device 150.

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 8 and Fig. 9. Fig. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. Fig. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the rear surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back of the upper edge portion 3A above the opening 221, facing in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the rear side, and is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing the screw members N1 to N5 attached from the rear side to the multiple mounting holes H1 to H5 facing the front-rear direction into the multiple screw holes formed in the metal plate 222. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, a three-dimensional second protrusion 225 consisting of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C protrudes rearward.

The first protrusion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225, and the ball tank forming section 201 is disposed above it. The first guide passage forming section 202 is disposed behind the rear wall 225B of the second protrusion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is attached above it. The board mounting frame 211 is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 attached from the back side to the mounting hole H6 formed at the top into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223, with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower edge inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall 225B.

In this way, the mounting member 223 has a first protruding portion 224 and a second protruding portion 225 that protrude rearward, and is formed to cover the upper part of the game board 2. This prevents game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the top of the game island from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the screw members N11 to N14 attached from the rear side to the mounting holes H11 to H14, and the screw member N15 attached from above to the mounting hole H15, into the multiple screw holes formed in the mounting member 223. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the earth wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 to remove the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. In addition, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above to the mounting hole H16 into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203.

As shown in the enlarged view of Figure 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 consist of a male thread portion NS and a head portion NH. Of these, screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 are flanged screws in which a flange portion F is integrally formed on the seat surface of the head as an anti-loosening portion. By increasing the contact area of the seat surface and increasing frictional force, they are screw members that are less likely to loosen than screw members N3 to N6.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH.

The screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 may be of any size and type, and the diameters L1-L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. The screw members N1, N2, N11-N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members with an integral flange F (washer). Instead of the flange F, a washer separate from the screw member may be attached to the screw member, and the flange F and washer constitute the anti-loosening portion of the present invention. The screw member includes members such as screws and bolts that will come off from the attached portion when loosened. The anti-loosening portion also includes the head NH or the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the flange F (washer), adhesive, etc.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 is required to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming section 201, and is formed in a concave shape with an open top so that ball clogging is less likely to occur in the first guide passage, and so that if ball clogging does occur, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 are arranged to cover the upper surface of the area where the game balls that are stacked vertically in the ball tank forming section 201 flow into the first guide passage forming section 202, and the third cover body 330 is arranged to cover the upper surface of the area where the game balls flow from the first guide passage forming section 202 into the second guide passage forming section 204, so that the game balls are rectified. However, although a portion of the upper opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by these first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330, the upper openings of the ball tank forming section 201 and the uncovered area 350 (see Figure 27) are open.

On the other hand, multiple screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 are arranged near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the mounting member 223. Also, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, there are arranged a large number of screw members (not shown) for assembling the framework that constitutes the gaming island, screw members (not shown) for attaching various devices (such as the replenishing device 150) arranged inside the gaming island to the framework, and multiple screw members for assembling multiple members that constitute the case bodies of the various devices.

If these screw members become loose and fall out due to vibrations or impacts generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to vibrations, impacts, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and fall from the uncovered area 350 of the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide path forming part 202 into the interior and enter the guide path of the game balls. In particular, the supply device 150 is located immediately above the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in Figures 3 and 4, and is a device that is prone to vibration when a certain number of game balls are sent to the ball tank forming part 201 to supply new game balls from the circulation path of the game island, or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed. Therefore, if the screw members (not shown) for attaching the supply device 150 to the frame of the game island or the multiple screw members for assembling the multiple members that make up the case body 150B of the supply device 150 become loose and fall out due to vibration, there is a very high possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide path forming part 202.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide passage forming section 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 along with the game balls flowing down, and eventually become mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the screw member may damage the sprocket or switching valve, balls may become jammed, putting a strain on the payout motor and causing it to break down, or the screw member may be paid out to the player along with the game balls, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

In this embodiment, as described below, various measures are taken to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 from entering the payout device 200, causing the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or to prevent the screw member from being paid out to the player along with the game balls.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 16. Fig. 10 (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. Fig. 11 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Fig. 10 (A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Fig. 10 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Fig. 10 (A). Fig. 12 (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Fig. 12. Fig. 13 (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in Fig. 12, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F in Fig. 12. Fig. 14 (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G in Fig. 12, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in Fig. 12. Fig. 15 is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) a cross-sectional view taken along line II of (A), (C) a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J of (A), (D) a perspective view showing the third cover body, and (E) a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. Fig. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part with the ball stopper member in the first state, and (B) a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part with the ball stopper member in the second state.

As shown in Figures 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and is formed into a concave or groove shape with an open top by a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guide passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 consists of an upstream portion extending diagonally backward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. The front-rear dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and it is capable of storing more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually slope downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 naturally flow down the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is protruding from the outer surface of the right-side vertical wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11, H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed on the top and bottom of the mounting piece 261. In addition, a mounting piece 265 is protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is protruding from the outer surface of the left-side vertical wall portion 203B of the first induction passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is protruding forward from the outer surface of the front-side vertical wall portion 203B of the upstream portion of the first induction passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is protruding from the front edge of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the multiple screw members N11 to N15 attached to these mounting holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the mounting member 223. In addition, a recess 280 that is approximately rectangular in plan view is formed in a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in Figures 11 and 12, holes 270A, 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall 203A and the rear upright wall 203B in the upstream part of the first guide path forming part 202 (see Figure 11 (A)). At approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A, 271B, multiple holes 271A to 271H are formed toward the downstream side. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall 203A at the downstream end of the first guide path forming part 202 to allow game balls to drop into the second guide path forming part 204 below.

A serpentine section 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming section 202, which causes the game ball to snake back and forth while flowing down toward the left side, and among the multiple holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed at positions corresponding to the serpentine section 273. By providing such a serpentine section 273, it is possible to prevent the ball pressure from being increased by the following balls.

The distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and the lower portion of 203B of the first guide path forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, but shorter than twice the dimension of the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm) (11 mm < L10 < 22 mm). In other words, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so that it can guide the game balls in a single row toward the downstream side.

The front-to-rear dimension L11 of the holes 271A-271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3-N6 described above (L11>L2), so that even if the screw members N3-N6 get mixed into the first guide passage forming part 202 as described below, the screw members N3-N6 can fall from the holes 271A-271H. In addition, the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (the dimension in the direction in which the game ball flows down) compared to the other holes 271A-271G, so that the screw members N3-N6 can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming part 202 before reaching the communication hole 272.

In other words, these holes 271A-271H constitute a specific restriction section for restricting the movement of the screw members N3-N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since dirt, dust, or other parts other than the screw members can also fall from these multiple holes 271A-271H, ball clogging is prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in Figures 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 is mainly composed of an attachment portion 311 which extends along the upper edge of the front vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and has a downward C-shaped cross-section that can be fitted from above into the upper end of the vertical wall portion 203B, a vertical wall portion 312 which extends from the right side of the attachment portion 311 toward the rear, a plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 which extends from the lower part of the vertical wall portion 312 and slopes downward toward the right side (the ball tank forming portion 201 side), a cover portion 314 which extends from the lower part of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (the first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and a plurality of engagement portions 315A to 315D which are formed to be elastically deformable on the front side of the attachment portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

The first cover body 310 thus configured is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by fitting the mounting portion 311 from above to the upper end of the front vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 positioned near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the multiple locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locking portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. In the attached state, the ball pressing portion 313 is positioned to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is positioned to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is positioned so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding section 313 is positioned on the ball tank forming section 201 side, so that even if the game balls supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the game island (not shown) are stored so as to be stacked vertically, as the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming section 202 side, they are pressed downward by the ball holding section 313, thereby rectifying the flow.

The cover portion 314 is formed with long holes 316A-316C that extend in the left-right direction and have a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a plan view, and are arranged in a row parallel to each other and penetrate vertically. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball and shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 described above (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed to a size that prevents the game ball and the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling out. In addition, reinforcing ribs hang down from the periphery of each of the long holes 316A-316C on the underside of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended in the direction in which the game ball flows downward, as shown in Figures 13(B) and (C), when the game ball P falls into the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, the game ball P can move in the direction in which the game ball flows downward (to the left).

(Second cover body 320)
14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 is mainly composed of a plate-shaped cover part 324 formed along the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a plurality of locking parts 325A, 325B formed elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the cover part 324, and is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by elastically locking the plurality of locking parts 325A, 325B to the locked part 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall part 302B with the right end part of the cover part 324 being brought close to the left end part of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

On the top surface of the cover portion 324, grooves 326A-326C are formed in a row extending in the left-right direction. The grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-back dimensions L22A-L22C, each of which is shorter than the diameter 2R of a game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The front-to-back dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest front-to-back dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 mentioned above (L22B>L2). In other words, the groove 326B is formed to a size that cannot accommodate a game ball, but can accommodate the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16. Additionally, the front-to-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A-316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-to-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1), so they are large enough to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the direction in which the game ball flows and are arranged to incline downward toward the direction in which the game ball flows, so that when the game ball P falls into the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, as shown in Figures 14(B) and (C), the game ball P is guided toward the direction in which the game ball flows (to the left).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in Figures 15(A) to 15(C) and 16, the third cover body 330 is mainly composed of a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed to fit along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, an attachment portion 331 protruding between the locking portions 335C, 335D on the rear surface and formed with an attachment hole H15 into which a screw member N15 is attached from above, and a ball stop member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334.The plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 are elastically engaged with an engaged portion 317 (see Figure 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B, and the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 into a screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. When attached, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is positioned so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the gaming balls (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 of a predetermined depth is provided on the top surface from the right end to the left side. A part of the right side reaches the serpentine portion 273, so it is formed to correspond to the shape of the serpentine portion 273. In addition, a slit 337 having a horizontally elongated U-shape in a plan view is formed at the position corresponding to the recess 336, forming a straightening plate 338 that can elastically deform so that the left end side swings up and down, and an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed at the right end, so that the game balls P stacked up and down can be guided and pressed toward the bottom wall portion 203A, and leveled (see FIG. 16).

The front-to-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 described above (L23>2R, L23>L2). In other words, the recess 336 is formed to a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16. In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, the recess 336 is extended along the direction in which the game ball flows and is positioned so as to incline downward toward the direction in which the game ball flows. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15(D), when the game ball P falls on the top of the recess 336, the game ball P is guided toward the direction in which the game ball flows (to the left).

In addition, the front-to-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 < L2), so the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 will not fall out of the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 is composed of a rotating part 341 having a plate-like front wall part 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall part 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall part 341A, a left wall part 341C connecting the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B, and a protruding wall part 341D protruding from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. On the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334, bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected. In addition, a slit 344 is formed on the right side of the bearing part 343A in the cover part 334, through which the front wall part 341A can be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), so that the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are allowed to flow down and be leveled, and finally allowed to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that the game balls are pressed downward to be leveled (straightened) to an extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball Stopping Member 340)
As shown in Figure 16 (A), the ball stopping member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating part 341 stands upward and a tilted position in which it tilts to the right, and is changeable between a first state in which the rotating part 341 is in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, allowing the game ball in the first guide passage forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204, and a second state, i.e., a ball stopping state, in which the rotating part 341 is in the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball in the first guide passage forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide path forming section 204, and in this state it is possible to remove the game balls from within the second guide path forming section 204 and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the pivoting portion 341 is open, and the space surrounded by the wall portion that is generally U-shaped in plan view and consists of the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 can be retained, as described below. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the pivoting portion 341 tilts, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D, as described below.

(Terminal Board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on Fig. 17 with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 17A is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, Fig. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K of Fig. 17A, and Fig. 17C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L of Fig. 17B.

8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is provided on the rear with a cable connection section (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11, etc. is attached and detached, and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. At positions corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232, a connection pinch (not shown) for clamping the tip of each cable C is provided. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connection pinch in a direction to close, i.e., in a direction to clamp the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operating sections 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of the spring (not shown).

The number of connections of the cable C that can be connected to the multiple connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming section 202 is a first number (e.g., 20), while each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming section 202, but the number of connections is a second number (e.g., 10) that is less than the first number.

The operating parts 233 are provided in a plurality corresponding to each connection hole 231, and are generally hook-shaped in side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side as the swing axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is opened, the operating part 233 is pressed upward or downward to swing the operating part 233, thereby opening the connection pinch (not shown). Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch released, and the pressing operation of the operating part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown), and the cable C is held. Note that the operating parts 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a specific operating part 233 is pressed, the adjacent operating parts 233 do not get in the way of the pressing operation.

The board mounting frame 211 is attached to the mounting member 223 by inserting the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the bottom edge into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B, and then screwing the screw member N6 attached from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223. In addition, the board mounting frame 211 is formed with an opening 234 in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape.

The inner surface of the board mounting frame 211 has a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, a plurality of locking portions 236 that can elastically lock from the front side to the periphery of the terminal board 210 whose forward movement is restricted by the restricting portions 235, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts against the periphery of the terminal board 210 to determine the placement position. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by the locking portions 236 elastically locking in a state in which the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting portions 235. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using the plurality of restricting portions 235 and the locking portions 236 as mounting means other than the screw members (by a mounting method other than the mounting method using the screw members).

The terminal board 210 has multiple connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, so when connecting multiple cables C to the connection holes 231, it is necessary to operate the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and an amusement parlor staff member or the like opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging down from the top of the game island may be pulled around to the front of the outer frame 60, putting tension on the connection part. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is susceptible to load on the mounting part, if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member will loosen and become easily removed, so it is mounted using a mounting method that does not use a screw member.

When the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). Since the operating portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the operating portions 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described below. In addition, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211.

(Installation state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to Figs. 18 to 21. Fig. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of the game frame as viewed obliquely from behind. Fig. 19 is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of the game frame, and Fig. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back surface of the game frame as viewed obliquely from behind. Fig. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back surface of the game frame. Fig. 22 is a N-N cross-sectional view of Fig. 21, Fig. 22 is a view showing the rotation state of the screw members, and Fig. 22 is an O-O cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 23 is a P-P cross-sectional view of Fig. 21, and Fig. 23 is a Q-Q cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 24 is an R-R cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. Fig. 25 is an S-S cross-sectional view of Fig. 21. In Fig. 26, (A) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a T-T cross-sectional view of (A), (C) shows the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the second state, and (D) is a U-U cross-sectional view of (C). Fig. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming part showing the movement state of the screw member. Fig. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming part showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in Figures 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1-N2 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and screw members N11, N12, N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3.

In more detail, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached from the rear side toward the front, away from the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen and fall out to the rear due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the rear side toward the front on the outer surface of the upright wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, at a position lower than the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out to the rear due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from above downward to the outer surface of the right side vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and at a position lower than the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw member N15 loosens and falls out upward due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of it falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in Figure 18 is extremely low.

In addition, screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 receive and store game balls supplied by the resupply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and are arranged around the ball tank forming portion 201, which is subjected to the weight of a large number of game balls. Since these are prone to vibration and impact, flanged screw members are used, which have a large contact area with the attached portion and are less likely to loosen.

In addition, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming section 201 are positioned so that they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming section 201 even if they loosen and fall out, i.e., positioned below the top opening of the ball tank forming section 201, thereby preventing the game balls from getting mixed into the ball tank forming section 201, which opens upward to receive and store the game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is positioned adjacent to (or may be abutting) the upper surface of the plate-shaped first protrusion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223, and the gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male thread portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1), so that the screw member is almost never pinched between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 and held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming portion 201.

In addition, the gap L31 formed between the rear of the bottom wall portion 203A of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is longer than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F (L3>L2), so that the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming portion 201.

As shown in Figures 18 and 19 (B), even if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounting portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is inclined downward toward the rear side, so the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, and is unlikely to be retained near the ball tank forming portion 201. This prevents the fallen screw member N15 from getting mixed into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board, causing a break or the like.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 9, 20 and 21(A), the first induction passage forming portion 202 and its periphery are fitted with screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222, a screw member N6 for attaching the board mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, and a screw member N16 for attaching the third cover body 330 to the first induction passage forming portion 202.

In more detail, the screw members N3 to N6 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the first guide path forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the first guide path forming portion 202. Also, the second protrusion 225 of the attachment member 223 is disposed between the attachment position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide path forming portion 202. Therefore, although the attachment position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 is somewhat distant from the first guide path forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side. Therefore, if the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that they will move backward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 and fall into the first guide path forming portion 202 as shown in FIG. 20.

As shown in Figures 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is attached to the mounting member 223 in a mounting hole H3 formed in a position forward away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. In addition, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is linearly extended toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when attaching the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower, but because the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the rear side, the bottom surface of the groove 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens and falls out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko game machine 1, it is highly likely to fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion portion 225 (see FIG. 22 (A)). Furthermore, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly backward when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is approximately horizontal toward the rear, the screw member N3 is less likely to move backward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

All screw members, including screw member N3, are composed of a head NH and a male thread NS, and when dropped onto the flat upper surface of upper wall portion 225A, they often assume a tilted position with the periphery of the head NH and the tip of the male thread NS in contact at two points (see FIG. 22(A)). As a result, when a tilted screw member N3 is subjected to vibration or impact, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male thread NS as if it is swinging its head, changing its orientation, as shown in FIG. 22(B). Therefore, when the screw member N3 falls onto a flat surface other than groove 227 on the upper surface of upper wall portion 225A or deviates from the rear end of groove 227, it may move linearly backwards, or it may move so as to bend to the left or right as the head NH rotates in a swinging manner. That is, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 20, if the vehicle moves backwards and curves to the right, it is likely to fall onto the first cover body 310, if the vehicle moves backwards in a straight line, it is likely to fall onto the second cover body 320, and if the vehicle moves backwards and curves to the left, it is likely to fall onto the horizontal wall 264 in front of the first guide passage.

20 and 21, if the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves backwards, bending to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male thread portion NS crosses the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread portion NS is inserted into one of the long holes 316A to 316C, but the head NH is engaged without falling out, so that the screw member N3 remains on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first induction passage forming portion 202. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C constitute a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, which is provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming portion 202, from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

Also, as shown in Figures 20 and 21, if the screw member N3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves linearly backward, it is highly likely to fall onto the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in Figure 22 (C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male thread portion NS crosses the grooves 326A to 326C, or a part of the male thread portion NS and the head portion NH are accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, so that the screw member N3 does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first induction passage forming portion 202 and remains on the cover portion 324. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C constitute a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming portion 202, into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

In addition, if the screw member N3 falls onto the horizontal wall 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall 225B of the second protrusion 225 and the first induction passage forming portion 202, it will remain in a tilted state on the horizontal wall 264. In other words, the horizontal wall 264 side is located below the upper end edge of the upper wall 225A and the vertical wall 203B between the rear wall 225B and the first induction passage forming portion 202, and a recess 290 with an open upper side is formed by the upper wall 225A, the vertical wall 203B, and the horizontal wall 264, so that the screw member N3 is accommodated and remains in this recess 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3, which is the periphery of the first induction passage forming portion 202, and the first induction passage forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first induction passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

20 and 21, the screw member N13 is attached to a mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263 in the first passage forming body 203, which is located forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens and falls out rearward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is highly likely to fall into a recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264 (see FIG. 23(A)). In more detail, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, and a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed near the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open upward by the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the material is accommodated and retained in this recess 280.

Also, as shown in Figures 20 and 23 (B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls out backwards due to vibrations or impacts occurring in the pachinko game machine 1, it may fall and become lodged in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 located on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13, which is in the periphery of the first guide path forming portion 202, and the first guide path forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the screw member N13 moving toward the first guide path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is attached to a mounting hole H4 formed in the mounting member 223, which is located forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls backward due to vibration or impact caused to the pachinko game machine 1, it is highly likely that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion portion 225 (see Figure 24).

20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 falls from the upper end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A as shown in Fig. 24, regardless of whether the screw member N4 moves backwards and bends to the right, moves linearly backwards, or moves backwards and bends to the right, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the upper wall portion 211H may enter the interior from the opening 234 and be accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the male screw portion NS may be inserted into the recess 243 formed between the board mounting frame 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, but the head NH may be engaged and not fall out, causing the screw member N4 to be retained. In other words, recesses 242 and 243 are provided between mounting hole H4, which is in the vicinity of first guide passage forming portion 202, and first guide passage forming portion 202, and constitute a special restriction portion for restricting screw member N4 moving toward first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the multiple operating parts 233. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, multiple cables C connected to multiple connection holes 231 hang down from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), and these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating parts 233 and the cables C are provided between the mounting hole H4, which is around the first guide path forming part 202, and the first guide path forming part 202, and constitute a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 moving toward the first guide path forming part 202 from falling into the first guide path forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backwards, bending to the right, and then passes over the vertical wall portion 203B, it falls into the first guide path forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 at the top opening of the first guide path forming portion 202. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 falls out between the game balls while moving downstream in accordance with the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A, so it falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the uncovered area 350 in the first guide path forming portion 202 and is discharged outside the first guide path forming portion 202.

Even if the screw member N4 does not fall through any of the holes 271B-271D, it will eventually fall through any of the holes 271A-271H and be discharged outside the first guide path forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A-271H form a specific restriction section for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming section 201 or the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4, moves backward so as to bend to the left, and then exceeds the vertical wall portion 203B, it falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330, and is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover portion 334 into the first guide path forming portion 202. In other words, the recess 336 constitutes a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334, which is provided so as to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guide path forming portion 202, from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is attached to a mounting hole H6 formed in the board mounting frame 211, located forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens and falls backward due to vibration or impact caused to the pachinko game machine 1, it is highly likely that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see Figure 25).

20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by the multiple ribs 211A extending rearward to move linearly rearward, and then when it moves to turn to the right, it falls into a position near the upstream side of the ball stop member 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 as shown in FIG. 25. As explained in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (the dispensing device 200 side), so that the screw member N6 that has fallen into a position near the upstream side of the ball stop member 340 on the cover portion 334 is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower side of the incline, and the movement downstream (left side) is restricted, causing the screw member N6 to remain on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 26(A) and (B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is open, and the screw member N6 can be retained in a space surrounded by the wall portion that is approximately U-shaped in plan view and is made up of the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, so that the screw member N6 can be held without falling off the cover portion 334. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 26(C) and (D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D, so that the screw member N6 can be held without falling off the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is simply arranged to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted, may fall backward or forward. In contrast, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted, are covered by the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, so that the screw member N6 can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side of the screw member N6, whose movement is restricted. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portion 334 in the inclination direction, and constitutes a specific portion that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 at the cover portion 334.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is attached to the mounting hole H5 formed in the mounting member 223, which is located on the front right side of the downstream portion of the first induction passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. However, the first induction passage forming portion 202 is not located directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens and falls backward due to vibration or impact, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but there is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first induction passage forming portion 202 before reaching the first induction passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first induction passage forming portion 202 and at a position lower than the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens and falls rearward due to vibration or impact, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first induction passage forming portion 202 rather than falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, when the screw members N3 to N6 etc. provided at a position above the first guide path forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 become loose and fall out due to vibrations or impacts occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and move rearward on the upper wall portion 225A due to the vibrations, impacts or opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then fall onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336 and the ball stopping member 340 restrict the screw members from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202, and therefore the screw members are highly likely to remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide path forming portion 202, and therefore it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 from moving and becoming mixed into the payout device 200. In addition, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream) end of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it can be effectively prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 28, the upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 is covered by the cover sections 314, 324, and 334 except for the uncovered area 350. However, even if a game ball supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 spills over and lands on the upstream cover sections 314 and 324, the front-to-rear dimensions of the long holes 316A-316C and the grooves 326A-326C are narrower than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Therefore, the game ball P rolls to the left and then falls from the left end of the cover section 324 into the uncovered area 350 and is returned to the first guide passage forming section 202.

As a result, not only can game balls that have landed on the cover portions 314, 324 be returned to the first guide path forming portion 202, but it is also possible to prevent the falling screw member N from restricting the space in which it can be retained due to game balls P being retained in the long holes 316A-316C and the recessed grooves 326A-326C, or from coming into contact with the retained game balls and falling from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide path forming portion 202.

In addition, if a game ball falls onto the cover portion 334, it will flow down the cover portion 334 toward the left side and be restricted from flowing down by the ball stopper member 340, or it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, in the long holes 316A-316C as the first retention portion and the recessed grooves 326A-326C as the second retention portion, the recessed groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A-316C, and the front-to-back dimension L22B is larger than the front-to-back dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member becomes more likely to be retained in the retention portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324 can be prevented from moving and falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

On the other hand, if the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration or impact and fall from the non-covered area 350 provided between the cover parts 324 and 334 into the first guide path forming part 202, or if, like the screw member N4, it moves backward on the upper wall part 225A and then falls directly from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202, it will move downstream as the game balls P flow down in the first guide path forming part 202, slip out between the game balls, and approach the bottom wall part 203A, and fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged outside the first guide path forming part 202, so that the screw members that have fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 can be prevented from moving and being mixed into the payout device 200.

The multiple holes 271A-271H formed in the bottom wall 203A are formed from the midstream (near the meandering section 273) to the downstream section of the first guide passage forming section 202, and there is an area where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in a position close to the ball tank forming section 201 and the most upstream hole 271A of the holes 271A-271H. In this way, by forming an area where multiple holes are not formed in the upstream section of the first guide passage forming section 202, it is possible to preferably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall 203A near the upstream section of the first guide passage forming section 202, where ball pressure is applied when game balls from the ball tank forming section 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state.

In addition, by forming an area in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, it is possible to appropriately prevent the screw member that has fallen from the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the interior of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation hole 220B (see Figure 6) formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to areas in the first guide path forming section 202 where no holes are formed, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming section 202, and also to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 without falling outside the first guide path forming section 202.

In addition, the largest hole 271H among the multiple holes 271A-271H is located at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be dropped from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide path forming section 202 in an appropriate manner, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming section 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming section 202, the balls are stacked vertically in the ball tank forming section 201 and the non-covered area 350, so the screw member is often located above the game balls. However, the hole 271H is located downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover section 334, that is, it is located in a position where the game balls are straightened in a single vertical layer, so the screw member is likely to fall into the hole 271H. This makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming section 202 from entering the payout device 200.

In addition, at least some of the holes 271B-271D among the multiple holes 271B-271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the first induction passage forming portion 202, so that even if a screw member enters the first induction passage forming portion 202 from the non-coated area 350, it can be dropped out of the first induction passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B-271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E-271H among the multiple holes 271B-271H are provided closer to the payout device 200 than the uncovered area 350 in the first guide path forming section 202. Therefore, even if a game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide path forming section 202 does not reach the holes 271B-271D as described above, the game ball will move downward as it flows downward and is more likely to fall from the holes 271E-271H, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

As shown in Figures 22(C), 23(A)(B), and 24, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are provided below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the mounting portion, and the screw members N3 to N6 that have come out of the mounting holes H3 to H6 but have not come out of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, and 334, thereby preventing the screw members N3 to N6 that have come out of the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first induction path forming portion 202.

In addition, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed, a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes, so that the screw members N3 to N6 that are stuck in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 can be easily removed.

In addition, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the long holes 316A-316C, the grooves 326A-326C, and recess 336 not only prevent (or hinder) the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also act as retention portions that can retain the screw member outside the first guide path forming portion 202, making it possible for an amusement arcade staff member to find the screw member when inspecting the game, making it easier to identify which screw member has come loose, and making it easier to take measures to prevent the screw member from getting into the payout device 200.

The ball stopper member 340 as a specific part can be changed between a first state in which the rotating part 341 is in an upright position and the front wall part 341A is deviated upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a second state in which the rotating part 341 is in a tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 to be able to contact the game ball, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to flow down to the second guide path forming part 204. When the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to remain than when it is in the first state, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 can be prevented from entering the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stopping member 340 is in the second state when game balls are removed from the first or second guide passage, that is, when the arcade staff inspects or performs maintenance on the pachinko game machine 1, whereas the ball stopping member 340 is in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the arcade staff cannot monitor it, and therefore in such a state it is possible to effectively prevent the screw member from becoming mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at multiple points by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as an anti-loosening portion, and the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached at a position lower than the upper edge of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 so that they will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the ball tank forming portion 201 are prone to loosening due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, they are made to be flanged screw members to make them less likely to come off the game machine frame 3, while the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide path forming portion 202 will fall outside the first guide path forming portion 202 even if they come off, so it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, among the multiple screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a certain screw member (e.g., screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also used as a screw member for attaching an earth wire (e.g., earth wire 226), thereby reducing the number of screw members (number of parts) and preventing a screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200. Note that, instead of an earth wire, the screw member may also be used as a screw member for attaching a certain component other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to a metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, which allows the ball tank forming portion 201 to be attached firmly and reduces the risk of vibration, thereby effectively preventing the screw members from loosening.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide path forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members with a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Therefore, even if the screw members fall into the first guide path forming portion 202, they can be easily dropped through the holes 271A to 271H, thereby preventing the screw members from becoming mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide path forming section 202 on the game board 2 that can be attached and detached to the game machine frame 3, an inclined surface (e.g., the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can cause the falling screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 is provided with a gap from the first guide path forming section 202, thereby preventing the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 from bouncing back into the first guide path forming section 202 again.

Although not specifically shown, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are arranged so that they do not protrude rearward beyond the rear wall of the cover body 220, and any screw members that fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 are guided to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that fall onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A located below.

The cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12 provided on the rear side of the game board 2, and a plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that dissipate heat generated from these drive sources are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). These heat dissipation holes 220B are preferably large enough to allow the male threaded portion NS of the screw member to be inserted, but at least the head NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since the upper wall portion 220H located directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202 is highly likely to have the screw member fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, it is preferable that the heat dissipation holes 220B are formed at least in a position in the upper wall portion 220H that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or are formed in a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). This prevents the screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and causing adverse effects on the image display device 5, the performance device having a movable body, the performance control board 12, etc.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29(A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover part.

In the above embodiment, the guide path forming section that forms the guide path that guides the game balls from the ball tank forming section 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide path forming section 202 that extends so as to incline downward toward the left side, and a second guide path forming section 204 that extends downward from the left end of the lower side of the first guide path forming section 202. The cover section 334 of the third cover body 330 that is provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide path forming section 202 has a ball stopper member 340 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the left end as shown in FIG. 16, so that the screw member N moving to the left on the cover section 334 can be received and retained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left end 360R of the cover section 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves downward toward the second guide path forming section 204, as in the cover section 360 of this modified example 1.

By doing this, when the game ball P or screw member N that has fallen onto the cover portion 360 moves toward the left end side, it does not remain on the cover portion 360 but falls directly from the left end of the first guide path forming portion 202 outside the first guide path forming portion 202, thereby preventing the screw member N from getting mixed into the payout device 200.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, a cable CH may be provided in a position adjacent to the recess 361 in the cover portion 360 so as to cross the flow direction of the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing this, the screw member N and the game ball P that are stuck in the recess 361 but may move due to the tilt can be kept stuck there by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
For example, in the above embodiment, screw members N1-6 and N11-16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame constituting the gaming island, and screw members (not shown) for attaching various devices (e.g., the supply device 150, etc.) arranged inside the gaming island to the frame, etc. are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all screw members such as screw members that remain in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during the manufacture of the gaming machine or during maintenance at the gaming parlor, can be targeted, but it is preferable that at least screw members that are previously attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a ball tank forming section 201 formed in a box shape with an open top by a bottom wall section 203A and a vertical wall section B was used as a storage section capable of storing game media, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage section can store game balls, it does not have to have a longer front-to-back dimension than the first guide passage forming section 202 like the ball tank forming section 201, and it may have a front-to-back dimension that is approximately the same as or shorter than the first guide passage forming section 202. Also, as long as it is capable of receiving game balls supplied from the refill device 150, the top does not necessarily have to be open.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls using a rotatable sprocket was applied as a payout section capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a payout device capable of paying out game balls using a member other than a sprocket may also be used.

In the above embodiment, the first guide path forming section 202 is formed as a groove with an open top by a bottom wall section 203A and a vertical wall section 203B as a guide path forming section that has an open top and forms a guide path that guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide path forming section may be made of a cylindrical member with an opening formed in part of the top surface, and the shape, size, etc. may be changed in various ways. Furthermore, the width dimension (front-to-back dimension) may be approximately the same as or larger than the ball tank forming section 201, and the balls may be guided so that they can flow down in multiple rows.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the ball tank forming section 201 as a storage section capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage forming section 202, which has an open top and forms a first guide passage that guides the game balls in the ball tank forming section 201 to the payout device 200, are integrally molded, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming section 201 and the first guide passage forming section 202 may be integrally formed by assembling separate members with a screw member or the like. In this case, the screw member that assembles the ball tank forming section 201 and the first guide passage forming section 202 also falls within the scope of the screw member of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, a screw member may be introduced through the top opening of the first guide path forming section 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. The screw member may be introduced through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side of the first guide path forming section 202. In addition, if the screw member may be introduced into the second guide path forming section 204, a predetermined limiting section for limiting the screw member from falling into the second guide path forming section 204, or a specific limiting section for limiting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the second guide path forming section 204 to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are used as cover parts provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming section 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover parts.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the cover portion that covers a portion of the upper surface of the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a separate member from the first induction passage forming portion 202, or may be formed integrally with the first induction passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a rectangular tube shape.

In the above embodiment, the long holes 316A-316C as holes capable of retaining the screw member on the cover portion, and the grooves 326A-326C and the recess 336 as recesses are used as predetermined restricting portions for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the screw member from falling from the cover portion, a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member on the cover portion, or a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the fall or movement may be not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, or an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member.

In other words, the specified restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 need not only be something that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also something that can make it difficult for the screw member to fall.

In the above embodiment, a form in which a plurality of holes 271A to 271H are applied as a specific limiting portion provided in the first guide path forming portion 202 to limit the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 toward the payout device 200 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movement limiting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming portion 202 toward the payout device 200 side may be used. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement toward the payout device 200 side, not only a convex portion or a concave portion but also a magnet that can attract a metal screw member or an adhesive portion that can adhere to the screw member may be used, and these are preferably provided in a position that does not affect the flow of the game balls (for example, a portion that does not come into contact with the game balls, such as a corner between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide path forming section 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is not necessarily limited to a section that prevents the screw member that has entered the first guide path forming section 202 from moving toward the dispensing device 200, but may be a section that makes it difficult for the screw member to move, as long as it can restrict the movement of the screw member toward the dispensing device 200.

In addition, if the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the payout device 200 is restricted (restricted, hindered) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guide path forming section 202, the flow of the game balls down is also restricted by the screw member that is stuck in the first guide path due to the restricted movement, and there is a high possibility that ball jamming will occur. If ball jamming occurs, as described above, a supply error notification is executed, and it is highly likely that a store clerk at the game arcade will open the game machine frame 3 and visually inspect the ball tank forming section 201 on the back and the state of the game balls in the first guide path forming section 202. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 and is stuck in the first guide path forming section 202, it becomes easier for the store clerk to identify that the screw member was the cause of the ball jam, and it becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which all of the multiple holes 271A-271H are large enough to allow the screw member to drop through them has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as at least two of the multiple holes 271A-271H are formed to allow the screw member to drop through them, the other holes do not need to allow the screw member to drop through them. Furthermore, the shape and size of the multiple holes 271A-271H are arbitrary and can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above configuration.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 are used as the first board that is attached below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a terminal board 210 is used as the second board that is attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

In the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 as the first board are illustrated as being attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21 through the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned various boards as the first board may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without going through a board case.

In the above embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 as the first board are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which the boards are stored, using screw members N20 and N21, that is, by a mounting method using screw members, and the terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as a mounting means different from the screw members, that is, by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a locking means such as a latch member, a mounting means such as a rivet pin, or an adhesive means such as an adhesive.

In the above embodiment, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are provided around the first induction passage forming portion 202 as special restricting portions for restricting the screw member moving toward the first induction passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the screw member from falling into the first induction passage forming portion 202, a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of restricting (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member toward the first induction passage forming portion 202, or a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall outside the first induction passage forming portion 202. In addition, the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the fall or movement into the first induction passage forming portion 202 may be not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, or an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member.

In other words, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the loosened screw member into the first guide passage forming portion 202 need only be something that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also something that can make it difficult for the screw member to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restriction portion (fall inhibition portion), or a concave portion or hole portion as a movement restriction portion (movement inhibition portion) may be provided at a predetermined position on the upper wall portion 225A, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as the special limiting portion are provided is illustrated as being in the vicinity of the front vertical wall portion 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is at least between the mounting portion (mounting hole) where the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming portion, it does not necessarily have to be in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B, and for example, it may be provided in a position between the mounting portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion closer to the mounting portion than the guide passage forming portion.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a ball stopper member 340 that can be changed between a first state that allows the game balls of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down and a second state that makes it difficult or impossible for them to flow down is applied as a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 on the cover portion 334 side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the part is provided on the payout device 200 side (the lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 in the inclined direction, it may be a convex part, a vertical wall part, a wiring clamp, etc. that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side of the inclined direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific part may be provided on the end of the cover part 314, 324 on the dispensing device 200 side as long as it is provided on the end of one cover part on the dispensing device 200 side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed as part of the member that configures the cover part 334.

In the above embodiment, the flange portion F (washer) that is larger in diameter than the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and is formed integrally with the head NH is used as an example of an anti-loosening portion, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the flange portion F, a washer that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a rotation prevention portion for the head NH or an adhesive that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH or the flange portion F (washer) may be used. In addition, the screw member may be not only one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and may include members such as screws and bolts that come off from the attached part when loosened.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at multiple points by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F which is an anti-loosening portion, and the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are illustrated as being attached at a position below the upper edge of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 so that they will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if they are attached at a position above the upper edge of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the vertical wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, as long as they are attached at a non-directly above position horizontally shifted from a position directly above the first guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, the screw members can be prevented from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the dropped screw member may be guided by a predetermined guide portion (e.g., a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) so as to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the predetermined restriction section, specific restriction section, special restriction section, and specific section in the above embodiment are exemplified as being configured to restrict or regulate (hinder) the movement of not only the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also screw members other than the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the game island, toward the payout device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is preferable that the size and shape are formed to be capable of restricting or regulating (hindering) the movement of at least the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and further the screw members N3-N6 attached to the first guide passage forming section 202 and the upper position of the ball tank forming section 201, toward the payout device 200.

(Feature part 053SG)
Next, a description will be given of an embodiment of a gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG according to the present invention with reference to Figs. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in characteristic section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine installed in an amusement parlor or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with a gaming control board equipped with a gaming control microcomputer that controls the game. Note that the gaming machine described below can be the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, and the gaming control board can be the main board 11 in the above embodiment, and the presentation control board can be the presentation control board 12.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to multiple input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input status according to the progress of the game. Examples of input components include detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that identify the position of movable objects used in the game such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the player's advantage, and detection switches that detect the opening of doors and abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and input data that specifies the detection status of the input signals from the input components by the input circuit is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to multiple output components such as displays, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Examples of output components include displays that display according to the lottery results, displays that display the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, displays that instruct the player on how to operate, displays that display the value owned by the player, LEDs that show the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of abnormalities, motors that operate moving parts used in the game such as reels and variable winning devices, and solenoids.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to a corresponding output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

The game control microcomputer is connected to the input circuit and the output circuit via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit via a shared data bus.

In addition, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus; some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuits to the game control microcomputer without going through the shared data bus.

All output circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits may be connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through a shared data bus.

The data bus is also connected to an external output terminal, so that the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to an external device as an external output signal, and the external device can use the output data output as an external output signal to inspect the performance of the game machine, etc.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the gaming control board in Example 1 will be described. The gaming control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, where the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. In the following, the side on which the electronic components are mounted will be referred to as the mounting side, and the side on which the electronic components are not mounted and where the terminals of the electronic components are soldered will be referred to as the solder side.

Figure 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is rectangular with a pair of short sides extending vertically and a pair of long sides extending horizontally, and is made of an insulating printed board. In addition, the game control board has a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a plurality of wiring patterns made of conductors are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, in the area where the wiring patterns are not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, an insulating area made of an insulator and a ground area made of a conductor and constituting a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area except the area where the wiring patterns and insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, the mounting surface has more vertically extending wiring patterns than horizontally extending wiring patterns, while the solder surface has more horizontally extending wiring patterns than vertically extending wiring patterns, as shown in Figure 30-3. As a result, the vertically extending wiring patterns are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the horizontally extending wiring patterns are concentrated on the solder surface, minimizing the need for designs that require detouring wiring patterns when vertically and horizontally extending wiring patterns intersect.

Also, as shown in Figure 30-3, many of the wiring patterns arranged on the solder side extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting side. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are only mounted on the mounting side, and not on the solder side, so that the relatively long wiring patterns arranged on the solder side are not obstructed by the electronic components.

In addition, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface via a through hole, so that the branching occurs without having to detour one of the branched wiring patterns or intersecting one of the branched wiring patterns with the other wiring pattern on the same surface.

Figure 30-4 shows the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment with the input circuit and output circuit mounted on it.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components with one or more rows of terminals consisting of multiple terminals lined up in one direction. Most of the electronic components with these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, the mounting surface has a high proportion of wiring patterns that extend vertically, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction, so that the wiring patterns extending vertically can be connected directly to the terminal rows lined up in the horizontal direction without changing the direction.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit and output circuit, among the electronic components with terminal rows, are formed in a rectangular shape, have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and have a model number printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be identified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from right to left, so that it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number.

Figure 30-5 shows the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-6 shows the wiring pattern branching off from the data bus on the mounting side of the game control board in this embodiment.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending horizontally on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. 30-5, it is made up of eight wiring patterns extending horizontally from through holes to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side of the game control board are connected to the right side. The data bus and electronic components such as the input circuit and output circuit are connected by wiring patterns that branch out through the through holes to the mounting surface side and extend vertically in the up-down direction, as shown in FIG. 30-6.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated laterally via a data bus in this way, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are first connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending laterally, and then branch off through through-holes at the positions where the electronic components are mounted to wiring patterns on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic components, and are then connected to the electronic components. This eliminates the need to detour around the wiring patterns branching off from the data bus, and allows efficient connection of the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring patterns constituting the data bus are formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components, and furthermore, since the data bus and electronic components are connected by wiring patterns branching off to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring patterns on the mounting surface side are shorter, and are less susceptible to noise from the electronic components between them.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring pattern extending in the horizontal direction that constitutes the data bus is not formed in a straight line, but is divided into multiple wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern is formed shorter than the antenna length (λ (bus clock)/2) at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used to transmit data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. Therefore, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is prevented from emitting unintended radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if it is 1/2 the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board, so the length (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern is formed to a length that is not 1/2 the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and it is prevented from emitting radio waves due to strong resonance caused by reflection on the surface of the board.

Although the bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and oscillator implemented, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock with the maximum expected frequency, and is formed to be a length that is not 1/2 the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock with the maximum expected frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted with a bus clock with a frequency lower than the maximum expected frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns that make up the data bus are connected to each other via a wiring pattern that extends diagonally to the right or left, i.e., in a direction different from the direction of the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns. In addition, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns and the diagonally right or left wiring patterns are connected by bending at an obtuse angle. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent parts of the wiring patterns.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the wiring patterns are branched to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface side (the wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6) through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring patterns that connect the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns, and the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using the diagonal wiring patterns that connect the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns.

In the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into multiple wiring patterns, and the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns are connected to each other by a diagonal wiring pattern formed on the same solder surface. However, the multiple divided horizontal wiring patterns may be connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, that is, the horizontal wiring patterns may be formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at the point where it switches from the solder surface or mounting surface to the other surface, and such a configuration makes it possible to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus without detouring the branched wiring pattern or crossing it on the same surface.

Figure 30-7 shows the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-8 shows the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in Figures 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed on almost the entire mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board, except for the areas where the wiring pattern and insulating area are formed. The ground area formed on the gaming control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated by an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the area on the left side of the gaming control board, and the second ground area is formed in the area on the right side of the gaming control board.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-7, electronic components (low-voltage components) to which wiring patterns that transmit low-voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this embodiment) signals, such as a game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit, are connected are mounted in the left area where the first ground area is formed, and the ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns that transmit high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as a drive circuit for operating a motor or solenoid, are connected are mounted in the right area where the second ground area is formed, and the ground terminals of the high-voltage components are connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high-voltage components to the low-voltage components through the ground area. In addition, since the first and second ground areas are formed on the opposing sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, so that even if a temporary potential difference occurs between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor prevents current from flowing from one ground area to the other.

As shown in Fig. 30-7 and Fig. 30-8, an insulating region where no wiring pattern is formed between the first and second ground regions is formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, so that the first and second ground regions are electrically isolated from each other. Furthermore, the first and second ground regions on the mounting surface and the first and second ground regions on the solder surface are formed to overlap, and the insulating region separating the first and second ground regions on the mounting surface and the insulating region separating the first and second ground regions on the solder surface are also formed to overlap, so that even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface to the other surface of the solder surface, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Figure 30-10 shows the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-11 shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-12 shows the game control board in this embodiment stored in the board case.

As shown in Figure 30-10, the game control board has multiple connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the bottom edge of the mounting surface for connecting wiring from outside the game control board. The wiring from the game control board includes wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the game's advantage, such as a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal for transitioning to a changeable state a set value that determines the player's advantage, such as the lottery probability, a signal for changing the set value, a signal for displaying information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting a detection signal for an error release operation, and wiring as a backup power supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, i.e., the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but as shown in FIG. 30-11, they are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, i.e., the surface opposite the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors, such as the connector number, is printed around the mounting parts. Note that the information printed around the mounting parts of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be information about the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting side through through holes at the ends opposite the side connected to the terminals. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and are provided at locations where the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are first connected to the electronic components. For this reason, it is possible to connect from the solder side to the wiring patterns on the mounting side using the through holes for connecting to the electronic components.

As shown in Figures 30-12 (A) and (B), the gaming control board is attached to the gaming machine while housed in a board case. The board case can be sealed with a one-way screw, a seal, or welding, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving traces. For this reason, by attaching the gaming control board to the gaming machine while housed in the board case, the structure is such that tampering with the gaming control board is prevented.

As shown in Figures 30-12 (A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is stored. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed in the area of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the board case, but the wiring pattern is formed to avoid this area. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes that are approximately the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes, allowing wiring from the outside to be connected.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, some gaps will be created around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because they are connected to external wiring. However, the terminals on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, i.e., the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, i.e., the surface opposite the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. This prevents fraudulent acts such as shorting or breaking the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 around the area where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

The mounting surface is covered with a covering portion of the board case around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7, and no wiring patterns, including those connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7, are formed in the area covered by the covering portion. The wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, so that unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the area where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

Figure 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and connected to the power supply input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Vcc (+5V) also branches off from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and is connected to the charging capacitor via a backflow prevention diode, and the line branching between the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as the driving power source for the game control microcomputer and is charged in the charging capacitor. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power source VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer retains the data stored in the RAM provided in the game control microcomputer by receiving the backup power source VBB. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may also be supplied from a circuit provided in the game control board.

Figure 30-14 is a diagram showing the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-15 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder side.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, the solder side of the game control board is formed with wiring patterns constituting the power supply line, including wiring patterns Vcc1-3 for supplying normal power and wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power. As shown in FIG. 30-14 and FIG. 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1-3 are composed of wiring patterns formed on the solder side and wiring patterns formed on the mounting side, and are connected to electronic components mounted on the game control board. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-14, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of wiring patterns formed on the solder side. In other words, the wiring pattern VBB is not connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting side, but is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder side. In other words, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder side. For this reason, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, making it less susceptible to external noise and preventing the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-15, a solid ground is formed on the mounting surface in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in FIG. 30-15, of the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring patterns used for signal transmission, in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side, than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. Therefore, the effect of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring patterns used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is minimized.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring patterns that transmit signals related to the player's interests, such as signals that trigger a lottery, are formed at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns that transmit signals that do not directly relate to the player's history, such as signals that control output components. By forming the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface at a position where it has fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side, the influence of noise from the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side on the wiring patterns that transmit signals related to the player's interests is minimized.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit relatively important signals, such as a wiring pattern that transmits a reset signal to the game control microcomputer and a wiring pattern that provides an operating clock to the game control microcomputer, are configured to be formed at positions that have fewer intersections with the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than wiring patterns that transmit other signals, thereby minimizing the effect of noise from the wiring patterns used to transmit signals formed on the mounting surface side on the wiring patterns that transmit relatively important signals.

Figure 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which a gaming control board is installed in a slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with gaming components related to gaming, such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance, a reel unit consisting of multiple reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When the gaming control board is installed in the slot machine, the gaming control board is installed so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is positioned on the gaming components side. This configuration reduces the effect of noise emitted from the gaming components on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied.

Figure 30-17 shows an example of a situation in which a gaming control board is attached to a pachinko gaming machine. When pachinko gaming machines are installed in an amusement facility, they are often installed with their backs facing other gaming devices, such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the gaming control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the gaming control board is attached so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is positioned on the other gaming device side. This configuration reduces the effect of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied.

(Effect 1)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the ratio of wiring patterns extending in a first direction (vertical direction) is greater than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in a second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction in the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, and the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) is greater than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) in the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface. According to this configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that it is possible to minimize designs such as detouring the wiring patterns when the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) cross each other.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized by its rectangular shape consisting of a pair of sides (left and right sides) extending in a first direction (up and down) and a pair of sides (top and bottom sides) extending in a second direction (left and right). With this configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed efficiently along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components having a terminal row consisting of multiple terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (left-right direction). With this configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is rectangular with a pair of short sides (left and right sides) extending in a first direction (up-down direction) and a pair of long sides (top and bottom sides) extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and not on the solder surface. With this configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction), which may be longer, on the solder surface without being obstructed by the electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from wiring pattern 1 to wiring pattern 2, one of the two wiring patterns at the branched end is formed on the mounting surface, and the other wiring pattern is formed on the solder surface. With this configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branched end or to intersect one of the wiring patterns at the branched end with the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be formed preferably.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first terminal (a terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (a terminal of an input circuit and an output circuit) spaced apart in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected to form a specific wiring pattern (data bus) used to transmit a specific signal (input data, output data), the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing it into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and each straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is formed to be shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). According to this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and each straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is formed shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). This prevents the specific wiring pattern (data bus) from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and prevents unintended emission of radio waves.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected to each other by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). With this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight-line wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction different (diagonal) from the specific direction (left-right), but it may also be configured such that wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right) are formed alternately on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right) with a simple structure.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a specific wiring pattern (data bus) branches into a wiring pattern different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern that extend in a specific direction (left and right direction). With this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing the space between the one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern that extend in a specific direction.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is formed to be shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as the bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). With this configuration, the length of the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted at a frequency below the maximum frequency.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4) of the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). With this configuration, the straight-line wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance is not generated by reflection from the surface of the board, so unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected and a second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected are mounted, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to a first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to this configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part (insulating area), so that unintended current can be prevented from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is transmitted is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating section. However, in a configuration in which the difference in current flowing through the wiring pattern connecting the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component may be connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component may be connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating section. With such a configuration, even if the difference in current flowing through the wiring pattern connecting the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that unintended current backflow through the ground can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. With this configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a first ground area is formed on one side (left side) and a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite the first side, with a first electronic component (low voltage component) mounted in the first ground area and a second electronic component (high voltage component) mounted in the second ground area. With this configuration, the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, respectively, so that they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) where no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the insulation between the first ground area and the second ground area.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured so that a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, but even if a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the insulation between the first ground area and the second ground area can be improved.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the first and second ground areas on the mounting surface and the first and second ground areas on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the mounting surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. With this configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one side of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other side, they can be prevented from interfering with each other.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is mounted on the game machine while being housed in a board case, and the mounting surface is equipped with connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from outside the game control board, and the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface. With this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface, not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) includes wiring related to the game's advantage (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for transitioning to a state in which the set value can be changed, signals for changing the set value, signals for displaying information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, etc.). This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts related to the game's advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) about the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. With this configuration, the terminals of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and since no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface, by displaying information (connector number) about the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) in this area, the part of the mounting surface where no wiring pattern is formed can be effectively utilized.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the board case has a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering portion. With this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or breaking the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the area where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface at the points where they are first connected to the electronic components. With this configuration, the through holes for connecting to the electronic components can be used to connect to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface.

(Effect 5)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a memory means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, the game control microcomputer can retain the memory contents of the memory means (RAM) by a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which no electronic components are mounted, so there is no need to form it around the electronic components, and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, making it less susceptible to noise from the outside, and preventing the data stored in the memory means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized by being attached so that the mounting surface side is located on the side of the game components related to the game (such as the liquid crystal display and the performance control board that controls the performance). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is disposed on the side of another game device (another game machine). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a solid ground is formed in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area on the solder surface where the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided. With this configuration, the solid ground formed on the mounting surface can block noise from the mounting surface side.

The gaming control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer has fewer intersections with wiring patterns that transmit signals in the corresponding areas on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns (Vcc1-3) that supply other power sources. This configuration makes it possible to prevent as much as possible the effects of noise from the wiring patterns that transmit signals on the mounting surface side.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and it goes without saying that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls the game, but the configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to other boards mounted on the gaming machine, such as a board that controls the presentation, a board that controls the allocation of game media and game value, and even a board that relays boards together.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in Example 1, the game control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, with the terminals of the electronic components soldered thereto. Note that the configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as that of the game control board in Example 1, and here, the configuration that differs from that of the game control board in Example 1 will be mainly described.

Figure 30-18 shows the mounting side of the game control board in Example 1, and Figure 30-19 shows the solder side of the game control board in this example.

As shown in Figures 30-18 and 30-19, the gaming control board is rectangular with a pair of short sides extending vertically and a pair of long sides extending horizontally, and is made of an insulating printed circuit board. The gaming control board also has multiple through holes formed therein, and the mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board have multiple wiring patterns formed thereon to appropriately connect the through holes. Insulating areas and ground areas are formed in the areas of the mounting surface and soldering surface of the gaming control board where no wiring patterns are formed.

The game control board in Example 2 also has input and output circuits mounted thereon, similar to the game control board in Example 1, and these input and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and have a model number printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be identified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number.

Figure 30-20 shows the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder side of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 30-21 shows the wiring pattern branching off from the data bus on the mounting side of the game control board in this embodiment.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending horizontally on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, it is made up of eight wiring patterns formed to extend horizontally from through holes to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side of the game control board are connected to the right side. The data bus and the input and output circuits are connected by wiring patterns formed to branch out through the through holes to the mounting surface side and extend vertically in the up-down direction, as shown in Figure 30-21.

When connecting the game control microcomputer to the input circuit and output circuit separated in the horizontal direction through a data bus in this way, the terminal of the game control microcomputer is first connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending in the horizontal direction, and at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches through a through hole to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. Therefore, there is no need to detour the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and output circuit separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and further, since the data bus and the input circuit and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short, and it is less susceptible to noise from electronic components between them.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a location closer to the game control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus, so that noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the top edge of the figure, and the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed in an area toward the bottom edge of the game control board in the figure, that is, an area toward the other side opposite the side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. This ensures a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits between the data bus and connectors CN10 to CN17, which input and output signals from and to electronic components outside the game control board.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board is equipped with a first input circuit that detects input of an input signal from a first input part (such as a detection signal from a sensor or switch that does not trigger a lottery) that is relatively less important among the input parts used to control the game, a second input circuit that detects input of an input signal from a second input part that is more important than the first input part (such as a detection signal from a sensor or switch that triggers a lottery, or a detection signal that changes a set value that determines the degree of advantage), a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output part such as a solenoid or motor that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data from the game control microcomputer, a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output part such as various displays or LEDs that display according to the progress of the game based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that is mounted on the game control board and displays the performance of the game machine, such as the payout rate when playing for a certain period of time, based on output data from the game control microcomputer.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data and output data are transmitted via the data bus.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches off to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations and is connected to the wiring pattern formed vertically on the mounting side. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Also, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Also, the wiring pattern branched off to the mounting side through a through hole at positions O and P in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Also, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through a through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit, and branches off on the mounting side, with some of the wiring patterns being connected directly to the external output terminal, and the remaining wiring patterns are connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole once at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure, and then connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, of the input circuits and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuits are connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuits. This makes the input data used to control the game less susceptible to the effects of noise, etc.

Also, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the multiple output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a moving part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which could affect the operation of the moving part according to the progress of the game.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the multiple output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to an indicator (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game other than the performance indicator. This makes it difficult to tamper with the content of the performance display by arranging unauthorized components, etc.

As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole at position Q in the figure, is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs output according to the progress of the game, and also branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. In this way, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface is used to branch into a wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit to perform output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side, and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side to branch into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, may be connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs output according to the progress of the game, and may be branched on the mounting surface, with the branched wiring pattern being connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with this configuration, by using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to branch into a wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side and a wiring pattern connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device, there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side to branch into each of the wiring patterns connected to the multiple output circuits, and therefore the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Of the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus, and input data is transmitted directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is first connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through a through hole at position T in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through a through hole at position U in the figure, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit, which detects the input of an input signal from the first input part, which is relatively less important among the input parts used to control the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, while the second input circuit, which detects the input of an input signal from the second input part, which is more important than the first input part, is not connected to the data bus and is connected directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. Therefore, input data based on the input signal from the second input part is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus over which input data from other input circuits and output data to output circuits are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits and output data to output circuits.

(Effect 6)
The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a data bus is formed for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to this configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, so that the input data can be prevented from being affected by noise, etc.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured so that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit, but the output circuit may also be configured so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit.By configuring in this way, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise, etc.

The game control board of this embodiment is formed with a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and the output circuit includes a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output part that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output part that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to this configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output part that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, so that it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which affects the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment is configured so that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit, but the second output circuit may also be configured so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit.With such a configuration, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs a display according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game, so it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the display according to the progress of the game.

In addition, as in the game control board of Example 1, when a first ground area in which low-voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a second ground area in which high-voltage components are mounted is formed on the right side, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is often a high-voltage component and is therefore mounted in the second ground area, and the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs a display according to the progress of the game is often a low-voltage component and is therefore mounted in the first ground area. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and by mounting the second output circuit in the first ground area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, and it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the second output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a data bus is formed that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected to the data bus through a through hole is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for outputting an output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. With this configuration, the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected through a through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for outputting an output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device, so there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side to branch into each of these wiring patterns, and the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game control board of this embodiment is formed with a data bus that is used both for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit, and includes a first input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer, a second input circuit that transmits input data to the game control microcomputer based on an input signal from a second input component used to control the game control microcomputer, and a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output output signals to the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and is characterized in that the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, and the second input circuit is connected to the game control microcomputer without via the data bus. With this configuration, input data based on an input signal from the second input component is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without passing through a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted, so input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. This configuration makes it possible to prevent noise from the electronic components from affecting the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus and the input and output circuits are connected by a wiring pattern that branches out through holes to the mounting surface opposite the solder surface on which the data bus is formed. With this configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input and output circuits is shortened, reducing the effects of noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that connectors (connectors CN10-CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (top side), and the data bus is formed in an area closer to the other side (bottom side) of the game control board that faces the one side. With this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10-CN17) and the data bus, making it possible to effectively utilize the board area.

The gaming control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other displays. With this configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other displays, making it difficult to tamper with the display content by arranging unauthorized components, etc.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted with different component orientations. With this configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily understood.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effect of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those in the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modified examples given for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the gaming control board in Example 3 will be described. As in Examples 1 and 2, the gaming control board has electronic components mounted on one side and no electronic components mounted on the other side, with the terminals of the electronic components soldered to it. The gaming control board in Example 3 is characterized by the electronic components mounted and the structure of the through holes, and the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described here.

Figure 30-23 is an oblique view showing the structure of a specific electronic component mounted on a game control board in Example 3, where (A) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from above, and (B) is an oblique view of the specific electronic component from below.

A specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and at the bottom of the specific electronic component, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B), there are fixing terminals 1 and 2 for the purpose of fixing the specific electronic component to a board and are not used to transmit signals or power of the specific electronic component, and a connection terminal that is connected to the wiring pattern of the board and is used to transmit signals and power of the specific electronic component. In addition, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component, and electronic components having only a connection terminal and no fixing terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through holes provided in the game control board are divided into normal through holes and special through holes. As shown in Figure 30-24 (A), normal through holes are copper-plated from the solder surface to the inner surface of the through hole, which provides electrical conductivity between the mounting surface and the solder surface. On the other hand, special through holes are not copper-plated on the inner surface of the through hole, which provides no electrical conductivity between the mounting surface and the solder surface, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B).

When soldering to a normal through-hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through-hole is copper-plated, so the solder in the through-hole flows up to the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through-hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the through-hole is not copper-plated, so the solder does not flow up inside the through-hole and does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes and the connection terminal into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side. This means that the solder does not reach the mounting surface, and this prevents problems such as the solder rising too far to the mounting surface side where the specific electronic component is mounted, causing the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 to be hidden by the solder.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that unauthorized replacement of parts will go unnoticed. Also, if the model number is hidden during type testing, the component configuration cannot be identified, which could result in the product failing the test and not being approved. Also, if the model number cannot be confirmed when installing the product in an amusement facility, there is a risk that the product will not be allowed to be installed in the amusement facility. However, such problems can be prevented by fixing a terminal with the model number printed or engraved on the top to a specific through-hole.

On the other hand, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used to transmit signals or power for a specific electronic component, so there is no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldered to a specific through-hole. On the other hand, the connection terminals are normally inserted into through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so the solder reaches the mounting surface, ensuring a reliable electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, the plurality of electronic components are fixed by inserting terminals into through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface and soldering the through holes and the terminals, and a specific through hole is formed to fix a specific electronic component among the plurality of electronic components, and the specific through hole is characterized in that the mounting surface and the solder surface are not conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so that when soldering, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted, which causes a malfunction.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1, 2) of the specific electronic components are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. With this configuration, since it is the fixing terminals (fixing terminals 1, 2) of the specific electronic components that are soldered to the specific through holes, there is no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak because the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In addition, the game control board in this embodiment is configured so that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted and soldered into the specific through holes, but it may also be configured so that the terminals for transmitting the signals and power of the specific electronic component (connection terminals) are inserted and soldered into the specific through holes. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as the solder rising too far to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted, causing the terminals for transmitting the signals and power of the specific electronic component to short out with other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). This configuration prevents the solder from rising too far up onto the mounting surface where the electronic component is mounted, thereby hiding the model number of the specific electronic unit.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Furthermore, the modified examples given for the first and second embodiments can also be applied to the third embodiment.

(Feature 053SG Invention)
As described above, the characteristic part 053SG includes the invention described below. In other words, conventionally, as described in, for example, JP 2016-93428 A, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, and for this type of board, a board has been proposed that uses a single data bus to input and output data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic devices. In this type of board, various issues exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of characteristic part 053SG (1) is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer) based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that to the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used to control the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means, thereby preventing the input data from being affected by noise, etc.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (2) is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on a first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on a second surface (solder surface).
This feature makes it possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (3) is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches through holes to the surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (4) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that a connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board is mounted near one side (top side) of the board, and the data bus is formed in an area near the other side (bottom side) of the board (game control board) that faces the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be utilized effectively.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (5) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) which outputs an output signal to the performance display device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit (second output circuit) which outputs an output signal to another display device.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuits that output output signals to other display devices, making it more difficult to tamper with the display content by, for example, placing unauthorized components.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (6) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate in such a way that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (7) is a gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (8) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer) based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs a display in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that to the second output circuit (second output circuit).
According to this feature, the first output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game, is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays in accordance with the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (9) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on a first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on a second surface (solder surface), and the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) connected to the data bus via a through hole is branched into a first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting on the first surface (mounting surface) in response to the progress of the game, and a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal in response to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected via a through hole from the data bus formed on the second surface is branched into a first wiring pattern for outputting on the first surface side according to the progress of the game and a second wiring pattern for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.Therefore, since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the second surface to the first surface side to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (10) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer) based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
a first input circuit (first input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), a second input circuit (second input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, input data based on an input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted, so that input data based on an important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (11) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that to the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used to control the control means, thereby preventing the output data from being affected by noise, etc.

The gaming machine of the characteristic part 053SG (12) is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a control means (game control microcomputer); an input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer) based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer); and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed;
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmitting output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs a display in accordance with the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit).
According to this feature, the second output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display in accordance with the progress of the game, is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit, which outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that performs operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise, etc., which would affect the display in accordance with the progress of the game.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed gaming machines in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed inside the gaming machine in a circulatory manner, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed gaming machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than gaming balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the gaming value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing gaming media (e.g., gaming balls P), a payout section (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out gaming media, an induction path forming section (e.g., first induction path forming section 202 or second induction path forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms an induction path (e.g., a first induction path or a second induction path) that guides the gaming media in the storage section to the payout section, and a guide path forming section (e.g., a first induction path forming section 202 or a second induction path forming section 204) that has an open upper surface and forms an induction path (e.g., a first induction path or a second induction path) that guides the gaming media in the storage section to the payout section, and The present invention relates to a play device that includes a cover portion (e.g., a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of an upper surface of a guide passage forming portion, a display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that is movable from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and the cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion (e.g., and the guide path forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for limiting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming portion to the payout portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27). The specific limiting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided in the guide path forming portion (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the guide path forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (e.g., holes 271A to 271H) for limiting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming portion to the payout portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27). The specific limiting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided so that the game media that have fallen onto the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without being retained therein. The effect execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and the gaming machine is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect in a predetermined period of time than when the effect execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display effect without executing the movable body effect in the predetermined period of time.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from falling into the guide path forming section. It also makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has become mixed into the guide path forming section from becoming mixed into the payout section. Furthermore, since the game medium does not become stuck in the specified restricting section and it is possible to maintain a state in which the screw member can always be stuck, it makes it possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover section from falling into the guide path forming section. It also makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the moving object presentation and the pseudo moving object display presentation are being executed.

In other words, by preventing the screw member from falling or getting mixed in the guide passage forming section or the payout section, it is possible to make the gaming machine less prone to malfunction, and since the player will pay attention to the performance when the simulated moving object display performance is executed in the hope that the moving object performance will be executed, the entertainment value of the performance can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less prone to malfunction when installed in an amusement facility and is likely to attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, an example of a form of gaming machine that can prevent screw materials from falling or getting mixed into the guide passage formation section or the payout section, and can draw the player's attention to the execution of a movable body presentation and a pseudo-movable body display presentation, is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that can be moved from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation, wherein the presentation execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display presentation that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body presentation that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and the gaming machine is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the presentation execution means executes the movable body presentation and the pseudo-movable body display presentation during a predetermined period of time than when the presentation execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display presentation without executing the movable body presentation during the predetermined period of time. Below, we will explain one example of the form of these gaming machines as well as other examples.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 40-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided,
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 40-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 40-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The gaming machine of form A4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The display means includes:
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 40-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, after the pseudo-movable body display is displayed at the second display position, the pseudo-movable body display is made non-displayed without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 40-26(A) to (J), Fig. 40-27(A)),
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is made invisible, the notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 40-26 (F) to (J) and Figure 40-27 (A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 40-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 40-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 40-40(A) to (C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 40-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image, making a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 40-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 40-16(C) );
The display means includes:
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position through an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) to the second display position (see FIGS. 40-40(A) to (C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 40-40(A) to (C));
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position have different speeds (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See Figure 40-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See Figures 40-10 and 40-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 40-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 40-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 40-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A8,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIG. 40-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A10 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A9,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the performance display unit (see FIG. 40-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 40-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A11,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 40-39(A) );
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 40-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 40-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 40-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to aspect A13 or A14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 40-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A17,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 40-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
The display means is capable of, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIGS. 40-43 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

Figure 31 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 32. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the mounted movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32 to the mounted movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the mounted movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the mounted movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 34. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 33.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 36 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 36 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 36 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 36(A).

As shown in FIG. 36(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 36(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 37, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the gambling nature excessively high. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 38 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the mounted movable body 32, such as control to drive the mounted movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the mounted movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 38 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 40-1 to 40-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 40-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 40-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 40-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "jackpot", or "minor hit", and the result of the determination (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 40-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 40-3(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 40-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 40-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 40-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 40-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 40-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 40-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not specifically shown, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 40-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 40-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 40-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 40-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or a probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 40-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 40-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 40-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 40-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning port is entered, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning port reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning port is entered, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning port is entered, the start winning port entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning port entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 40-9. Fig. 40-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 40-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 40-12. Fig. 40-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 40-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the player is expected to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 40-13. Fig. 40-13 (A) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining the situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 40-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 40-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a vertically facing rotating shaft 205L, 205R with the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 40-2) built into the performance section 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting section 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see FIG. 40-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner circumference that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 40-13 (B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 40-14. Fig. 40-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A) and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 40-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 40-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 40-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 40-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A-M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by two-dot chain lines in Figure 40-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 40-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 40-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 40-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D that correspond to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and can be changed between a first performance display state that corresponds to the first performance state, and a second performance display state that corresponds to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 40-15. Fig. 40-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 40-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 40-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 40-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 40-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development. However, due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made executable with a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 40-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance section M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical section M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 40-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 40-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 40-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 40-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 40-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 40-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B is capable of moving left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 40-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and is capable of stopping at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 40-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A-M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 40-16(C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 40-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 40-16 and 40-17. Figure 40-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 40-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 40-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap approximately in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 40-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 40-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-17 (B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 40-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 40-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display a part of the model movable body in a different display manner, or to display a manner that cannot be realized with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 40-10. Figure 40-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 40-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 40-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result being a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 40-34 (A) to (C)). The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 40-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 40-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 40-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 40-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 40-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 40-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead the button LED 62 (see FIG. 40-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position after a character image Z310 related to the model is displayed in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap (act on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 (see Figures 40-26 (A) to (J) and Figure 40-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated tapping operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby announcing that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 40-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 40-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 40-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 40-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that has been executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and is defeated by the enemy character, and the player loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, when the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 40-29 (E) to (G), Figures 40-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 40-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 40-11. Figure 40-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 40-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 40-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 39. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 40-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 40-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 40-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 40-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 40-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 40-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 40-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 40-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 40-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 40-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 40-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 40-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 40-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 40-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 40-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 40-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command specifies whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command specifies whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in Figure 40-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 40-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure chance jackpot (either sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), when it is a non-sure chance jackpot, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 40-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability hit A, variable probability hit B, variable probability hit C, non-variable probability hit, small hit) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command specifies whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command specifies whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 40-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 40-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 40-23 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "not execute". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(A), in the process of determining the type of final effect, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect determines the pattern of the final effect using the table for determining the type of final effect shown in FIG. 40-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined type of final effect is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the timer waiting for the start of the final effect is set to the period until the start of the effect (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which enable the operation of the push button 31B and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once, and for "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which enable the operation of the stick controller 31A and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 40-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 40-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on Fig. 40-25 to Fig. 40-31. Fig. 40-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. Fig. 40-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. Fig. 40-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. Fig. 40-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. Fig. 40-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach performance. Fig. 40-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. Fig. 40-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. Fig. 40-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 40-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 40-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 40-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 40-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 40-25(E), the light-emitting display units Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A, thereby executing the preview performance A that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 40-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 40-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on to drop the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 40-26 (A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 40-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 40-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated pushes of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 40-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 40-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not to display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-26 (J) in FIG. 40-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more appropriately enhancing anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 40-27(A), the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 40-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 40-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 40-27 (D) are different from the development suggestion effects and do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors that correspond to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc., displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 40-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (not displayed) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a reach title indicating the type of the super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected probability of a big win, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the CPU 120 starts the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) (see FIG. 40-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the determination performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, the CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image Z53 to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 40-28(C). On the other hand, if the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push operation of the push button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 40-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 40-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and a jackpot confirmation is announced. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 40-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 40-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 40-31.

As shown in FIG. 40-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 40-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 40-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 40-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 40-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then is not illuminated for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then is turned off for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 40-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 40-30(E), it moves and displays them to the first performance display position and then erases them. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 40-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 40-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 40-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop notification. Also, the small patterns are displayed as a miss pattern combination in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 40-33 to Fig. 40-34. Fig. 40-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 40-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 40-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 40-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 40-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 40-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 40-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 40-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-34(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 40-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 40-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 40-35 to Fig. 40-40. Fig. 40-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 40-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 40-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 40-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 40-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 40-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 40-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 40-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are both downward. In other words, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are both movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIG. 40-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2>L1).

As shown in Figures 40-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 40-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 40-36 (A') (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 40-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 40-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 40-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 40-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 40-28 to 40-30, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a movable body presentation in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the presentation position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the deciding presentation, and then notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 40-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 40-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of recoil actions of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during a first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during a period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during a second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during a second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 40-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 40-40.

As shown in Figures 40-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 40-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 40-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 40-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 40-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 40-40(B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and increasing the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 40-40(A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 40-40(B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 40-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 40-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second performance display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward directions, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a comparison of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 with the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison of the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave an impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be a comparison of the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison of the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then made invisible. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then made invisible without moving and displaying it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved from the second performance display position to the second performance display position is executed in the preview performance B and when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, the fact that the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs when pattern PBY-3, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or pattern PBY-4, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position, includes cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Figures 40-41. Figures 40-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 40-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 40-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 40-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 40-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 40-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Figs. 40-42. Figs. 40-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and a second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed in a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 40-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 40-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 40-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 40-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Figs. 40-43. Figs. 40-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 40-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 40-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 40-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening and closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. In this way, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted by utilizing the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, when the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this and various other effects can be applied. In addition, although these various effects can be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative front-to-back positions of each other, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls the display to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU
200 Dispensing device 202 First guide passage forming section 201 Ball tank forming section 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Hole portion 314, 324, 334 Cover portion 340 Ball stopper member N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A storage section capable of storing game media;
A payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming section having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the gaming media from the storage section to the payout section;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover a portion of an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
A blocking means for blocking the flow of the game media down the guide passage forming portion;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
a non-covered area that is not covered by the fall limiting portion on an upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions capable of limiting movement of the screw member that has dropped into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion,
At least a portion of the plurality of specific restriction portions are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered regions in the guide passage formation portion,
The screw drop limiting portion is configured so that the game medium that has fallen onto the screw drop limiting portion does not remain there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw drop limiting portion does not fall into the guide passage forming portion and can remain on the screw drop limiting portion,
Among a plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion, a predetermined screw member is also used as a screw member for attaching an earth member,
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
A gaming machine characterized by: